*** empty log message ***
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376interface.
377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 783Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 784@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
785
786@kindex -N
787@kindex --omagic
788@cindex read/write from cmd line
789@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 790@item -N
252b5132
RH
791@itemx --omagic
792Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
793not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
794libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
795mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
796is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
797specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
798
799@kindex --no-omagic
800@cindex OMAGIC
801@item --no-omagic
802This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
803sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
804be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
805shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
806
807@kindex -o @var{output}
808@kindex --output=@var{output}
809@cindex naming the output file
810@item -o @var{output}
811@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 812Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
813option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
814script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
815
816@kindex -O @var{level}
817@cindex generating optimized output
818@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 819If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 820the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
821should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
822option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
823the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
824no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
825of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 826
a712da20
NC
827@kindex -q
828@kindex --emit-relocs
829@cindex retain relocations in final executable
830@item -q
831@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 832Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
833Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
834order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
835in larger executables.
836
dbab7a7b
NC
837This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
838
4f471f39
RS
839@kindex --force-dynamic
840@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
841@item --force-dynamic
842Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
843to VxWorks targets.
844
252b5132
RH
845@cindex partial link
846@cindex relocatable output
847@kindex -r
1049f94e 848@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 849@item -r
1049f94e 850@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 851Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 852turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
853linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
854magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
855@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 856@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
857If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
858linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
859constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
860
62bf86b4
HPN
861When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
862partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
863relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
864example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
865with input files in other formats at all.
866
252b5132
RH
867This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
868
869@kindex -R @var{file}
870@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
871@cindex symbol-only input
872@item -R @var{filename}
873@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
874Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
875relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
876to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
877programs. You may use this option more than once.
878
ff5dcc92 879For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 880followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 881the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
882
883@kindex -s
884@kindex --strip-all
885@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 886@item -s
252b5132
RH
887@itemx --strip-all
888Omit all symbol information from the output file.
889
890@kindex -S
891@kindex --strip-debug
892@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 893@item -S
252b5132
RH
894@itemx --strip-debug
895Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
896
897@kindex -t
898@kindex --trace
899@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 900@item -t
252b5132 901@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 902Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
903
904@kindex -T @var{script}
905@kindex --script=@var{script}
906@cindex script files
907@item -T @var{scriptfile}
908@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
909Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 910@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 911@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
912output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
913the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
914specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
915options accumulate.
252b5132 916
14be8564
L
917@kindex -dT @var{script}
918@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
919@cindex script files
920@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
921@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
922Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
923
924This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
925processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
926command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
927@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
928behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
929command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
930the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
931@samp{gcc}).
932
252b5132
RH
933@kindex -u @var{symbol}
934@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
935@cindex undefined symbol
936@item -u @var{symbol}
937@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
938Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
939symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
940modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
941different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
942option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
943
944@kindex -Ur
945@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 946@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
947For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
948@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 949turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
950@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
951It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
952with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
953be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
954@samp{-r} for the others.
955
577a0623
AM
956@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
957@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
959@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
960missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
961specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
962multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
963input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
964in a linker script.
a854a4a7 965
252b5132
RH
966@kindex -v
967@kindex -V
968@kindex --version
969@cindex version
970@item -v
971@itemx --version
972@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 973Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
974lists the supported emulations.
975
976@kindex -x
977@kindex --discard-all
978@cindex deleting local symbols
979@item -x
980@itemx --discard-all
981Delete all local symbols.
982
983@kindex -X
984@kindex --discard-locals
985@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 986@item -X
252b5132 987@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
988Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
989system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
990or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
991
992@kindex -y @var{symbol}
993@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
994@cindex symbol tracing
995@item -y @var{symbol}
996@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
997Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
998option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
999to prepend an underscore.
1000
1001This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1002don't know where the reference is coming from.
1003
1004@kindex -Y @var{path}
1005@item -Y @var{path}
1006Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1007for Solaris compatibility.
1008
1009@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1010@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1011The recognized keywords are:
1012@table @samp
1013
1014@item combreloc
1015Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1016lookup caching possible.
1017
1018@item defs
560e09e9 1019Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1020shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1021
6aa29e7b
JJ
1022@item execstack
1023Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1024
cd6d6c15
NC
1025@item initfirst
1026This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1027It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1028before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1029the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1030the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1031objects.
1032
1033@item interpose
1034Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1035but the primary executable.
1036
5fa222e4
AM
1037@item lazy
1038When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1039dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1040the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1041Lazy binding is the default.
1042
cd6d6c15
NC
1043@item loadfltr
1044Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1045runtime.
1046
1047@item muldefs
1048Allows multiple definitions.
1049
1050@item nocombreloc
1051Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1052
1053@item nocopyreloc
1054Disables production of copy relocs.
1055
1056@item nodefaultlib
1057Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1058ignore any default library search paths.
1059
1060@item nodelete
1061Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1062
1063@item nodlopen
1064Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1065
1066@item nodump
1067Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1068
6aa29e7b
JJ
1069@item noexecstack
1070Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1071
1072@item norelro
1073Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1074
cd6d6c15
NC
1075@item now
1076When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1077dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1078when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1079deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1080first called.
1081
1082@item origin
1083Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1084
6aa29e7b
JJ
1085@item relro
1086Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1087
24718e3b
L
1088@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1089Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1090
1091@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1092Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1093
cd6d6c15
NC
1094@end table
1095
ece2d90e 1096Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1097
1098@kindex -(
1099@cindex groups of archives
1100@item -( @var{archives} -)
1101@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1102The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1103either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1104
1105The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1106references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1107the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1108archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1109object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1110would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1111they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1112resolved.
1113
1114Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1115it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1116more archives.
1117
69da35b5
NC
1118@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1119@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1120@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1123recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1124and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1125the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1126behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1127so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1128restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1129
4a43e768
AM
1130@kindex --as-needed
1131@kindex --no-as-needed
1132@item --as-needed
1133@itemx --no-as-needed
1134This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1135on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1136the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1137on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
010e5ae2
AM
1138needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1139for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1140which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1141the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1142linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1143@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1144
e56f61be
L
1145@kindex --add-needed
1146@kindex --no-add-needed
1147@item --add-needed
1148@itemx --no-add-needed
1149This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1150DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1151the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1152a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1153@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1154for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1155the default behaviour.
1156
252b5132
RH
1157@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1158@item -assert @var{keyword}
1159This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1160
1161@kindex -Bdynamic
1162@kindex -dy
1163@kindex -call_shared
1164@item -Bdynamic
1165@itemx -dy
1166@itemx -call_shared
1167Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1168for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1169default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1170for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1171multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1172@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1173
a1ab1d2a
UD
1174@kindex -Bgroup
1175@item -Bgroup
1176Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1177section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1178object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1179@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1180only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1181
252b5132
RH
1182@kindex -Bstatic
1183@kindex -dn
1184@kindex -non_shared
1185@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1186@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1187@itemx -dn
1188@itemx -non_shared
1189@itemx -static
1190Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1191platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1192variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1193may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1194library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1195option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1196option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1197shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1198references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1199libraries.
252b5132
RH
1200
1201@kindex -Bsymbolic
1202@item -Bsymbolic
1203When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1204definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1205for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1206within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1207platforms which support shared libraries.
1208
40b36307
L
1209@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1210@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1211When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1212symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1213This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1214libraries.
1215
55255dae
L
1216@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1218Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1219typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1220global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1221within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1222to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1223in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1224which support shared libraries.
1225
1226The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1227scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1228
40b36307
L
1229@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1230@item --dynamic-list-data
1231Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1232
1233@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1235Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1236is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1237
0b8a70d9
L
1238@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1240Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1241
252b5132
RH
1242@kindex --check-sections
1243@kindex --no-check-sections
1244@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1245@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1246Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1247been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1248perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1249suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1250allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1251restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1252Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1253force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1254option.
252b5132
RH
1255
1256@cindex cross reference table
1257@kindex --cref
1258@item --cref
1259Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1260generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1261Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1262
1263The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1264easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1265sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1266symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1267definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1268
4818e05f
AM
1269@cindex common allocation
1270@kindex --no-define-common
1271@item --no-define-common
1272This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1273The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1274@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1275
1276The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1277the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1278of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1279forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1280Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1281from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1282This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1283and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1284duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1285paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1286
252b5132 1287@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1288@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1289@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1290Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1291address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1292times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1293limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1294context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1295symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1296constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1297using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1298Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1299space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1300@var{expression}.
1301
1302@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1303@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1304@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1305@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1306@itemx --no-demangle
1307These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1308and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1309present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1310underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1311mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1312different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1313to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1314demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1315is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1316
1317@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1318@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1319@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1320@item -I@var{file}
1321@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1322Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1323generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1324linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1325doing.
1326
7ce691ae 1327@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1328@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1329@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1330@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1331Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1332with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1333
252b5132
RH
1334@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1335@item --force-exe-suffix
1336Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1337
1338If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1339@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1340the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1341option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1342Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1343it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1344
1345@kindex --gc-sections
1346@kindex --no-gc-sections
1347@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1348@item --gc-sections
1349@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1350Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1351targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1352performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1353@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1354
d5465ba2
AM
1355@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1356examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1357symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1358command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1359referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1360libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1361referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1362the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1363relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1364
ac69cbc6
TG
1365This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1366@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1367specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1368a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1369
c17d87de
NC
1370@kindex --print-gc-sections
1371@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1372@cindex garbage collection
1373@item --print-gc-sections
1374@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1375List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1376printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1377collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1378default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1379be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1380line.
1381
252b5132
RH
1382@cindex help
1383@cindex usage
1384@kindex --help
1385@item --help
1386Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1387
ea20a7da
CC
1388@kindex --target-help
1389@item --target-help
1390Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1391
2509a395
SL
1392@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1393@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1394Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1395@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1396
1397@cindex memory usage
1398@kindex --no-keep-memory
1399@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1400@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1401symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1402instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1403necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1404while linking a large executable.
1405
1406@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1407@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1408@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1409@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1410Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1411is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1412The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1413behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1414libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1415
aa713662
L
1416@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1417@kindex -z muldefs
1418@item --allow-multiple-definition
1419@itemx -z muldefs
1420Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1421report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1422first definition will be used.
1423
b79e8c78 1424@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1425@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1426@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1427@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1428Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1429This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1430determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1431shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1432how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1433
903249d7
NC
1434The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1435referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1436an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1437a shared library.
1438
1439The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1440libraries specified at link time are that:
1441
1442@itemize @bullet
1443@item
1444A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1445that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1446resolvable at load time.
1447@item
1448There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1449symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1450
1451The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1452select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1453architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1454appropriate memset function.
1455@end itemize
b79e8c78 1456
31941635
L
1457@kindex --no-undefined-version
1458@item --no-undefined-version
1459Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1460it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1461will be issued instead.
1462
3e3b46e5
PB
1463@kindex --default-symver
1464@item --default-symver
1465Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1466exported symbols.
1467
1468@kindex --default-imported-symver
1469@item --default-imported-symver
1470Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1471imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1472
252b5132
RH
1473@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1474@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1475Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1476files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1477been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1478This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1479errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1480have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1481inappropriate.
1482
fe7929ce
AM
1483@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1484@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1485Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1486library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1487
252b5132
RH
1488@kindex --no-whole-archive
1489@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1490Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1491archive files.
1492
1493@cindex output file after errors
1494@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1495@item --noinhibit-exec
1496Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1497Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1498errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1499when it issues any error whatsoever.
1500
0a9c1c8e
CD
1501@kindex -nostdlib
1502@item -nostdlib
1503Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1504command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1505(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1506
252b5132 1507@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1508@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1509@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1510@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1511file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1512@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1513object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1514object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1515should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1516usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1517name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1518list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1519command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1520this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1521@end ifclear
1522
36af4a4e
JJ
1523@kindex -pie
1524@kindex --pic-executable
1525@item -pie
1526@itemx --pic-executable
1527@cindex position independent executables
1528Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1529ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1530libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1531address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1532normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1533defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1534
252b5132
RH
1535@kindex -qmagic
1536@item -qmagic
1537This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1538
1539@kindex -Qy
1540@item -Qy
1541This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1542
1543@kindex --relax
1544@cindex synthesizing linker
1545@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1546@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1547An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1548@ifset GENERIC
1549This option is only supported on a few targets.
1550@end ifset
1551@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1552@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1553@end ifset
1554@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1555@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1556@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1557@ifset XTENSA
1558@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1559@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1560@ifset M68HC11
1561@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1562@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1563@ifset POWERPC
1564@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1565@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1566
1567On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1568optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1569in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1570instructions in the output object file.
1571
1572On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1573debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1574@ifset GENERIC
1575This is known to be
1576the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1577@end ifset
1578
1579@ifset GENERIC
1580On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1581but ignored.
1582@end ifset
1583
1584@cindex retaining specified symbols
1585@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1586@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1587@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1588@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1589Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1590discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1591symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1592@ifset GENERIC
1593(such as VxWorks)
1594@end ifset
1595where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1596run-time memory.
1597
1598@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1599or symbols needed for relocations.
1600
1601You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1602line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1603
1604@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1605@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1606@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1607@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1608Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1609linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1610arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1611them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1612also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1613objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1614@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1615ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1616@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1617
ff5dcc92 1618The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1619SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1620@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1621runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1622options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1623gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1624file systems.
252b5132 1625
ff5dcc92 1626For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1627followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1628the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1629@end ifset
1630
1631@ifset GENERIC
1632@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1633@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1634@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1635When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1636happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1637of the input files.
1638
1639When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1640non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1641shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1642explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1643specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1644@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1645either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1646appearing multiple times.
1647
28c309a2
NC
1648This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1649that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1650is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1651runtime linker would do.
1652
252b5132 1653The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1654libraries:
252b5132
RH
1655@enumerate
1656@item
ff5dcc92 1657Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1658@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1659Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1660between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1661specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1662used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1663at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1664by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1665the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1666@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1667On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1668@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1669environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1670@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1671On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1672directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1673@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1674For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1675variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1676@item
ec4eb78a
L
1677For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1678@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1679libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1680@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1681@item
252b5132
RH
1682The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1683@item
1684For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1685exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1686@end enumerate
1687
1688If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1689warning and continue with the link.
1690@end ifset
1691
1692@kindex -shared
1693@kindex -Bshareable
1694@item -shared
1695@itemx -Bshareable
1696@cindex shared libraries
1697Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1698and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1699shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1700undefined symbols in the link.
1701
252b5132 1702@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1703@item --sort-common
1704@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1705@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1706This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1707ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1708sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1709eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1710between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1711specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1712
2509a395
SL
1713@kindex --sort-section=name
1714@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1715This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1716patterns in the linker script.
1717
2509a395
SL
1718@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1719@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1720This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1721patterns in the linker script.
1722
252b5132 1723@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1724@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1725Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1726each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1727size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1728
1729@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1730@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1731Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1732output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1733This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1734certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1735cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1736that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1737support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1738input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1739more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1740many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1741
1742@kindex --stats
1743@item --stats
1744Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1745as execution time and memory usage.
1746
2509a395 1747@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1748@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1749Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1750configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1751that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1752
252b5132
RH
1753@kindex --traditional-format
1754@cindex traditional format
1755@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1756For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1757the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1758use the traditional format instead.
1759
1760@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1761For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1762symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1763full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1764@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1765trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1766combine duplicate entries.
1767
2509a395
SL
1768@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1769@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1770Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1771address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1772times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1773line.
1774@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1775for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1776@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1777should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1778sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1779
2509a395
SL
1780@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1781@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1782@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1783@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1784@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1785@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1786@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1787Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1788@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1789
2509a395
SL
1790@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1791@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1792@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1793When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1794of the first byte of the text segment.
1795
560e09e9
NC
1796@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1797@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1798Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1799values for @samp{method}:
1800
1801@table @samp
1802@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1803Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1804
1805@item report-all
da8bce14 1806Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1807
1808@item ignore-in-object-files
1809Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1810ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1811
1812@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1813Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1814ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1815when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1816libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1817command line.
1818@end table
1819
1820The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1821by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1822
1823Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1824unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1825can change this to a warning.
1826
252b5132
RH
1827@kindex --verbose
1828@cindex verbose
1829@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1830@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1831Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1832supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1833the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1834
1835@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1836@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1837@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1838Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1839used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1840about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1841is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1842see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1843use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1844symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1845@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1846
7ce691ae 1847@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1848@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1849@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1850@item --warn-common
1851Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1852a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1853but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1854you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1855Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1856warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1857
1858There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1859
1860@table @samp
1861@item int i = 1;
1862A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1863file.
1864
1865@item extern int i;
1866An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1867There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1868variable somewhere.
1869
1870@item int i;
1871A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1872variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1873The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1874single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1875size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1876a definition of the same variable.
1877@end table
1878
1879The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1880Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1881just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1882encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1883a common symbol.
1884
1885@enumerate
1886@item
1887Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1888definition for the symbol.
1889@smallexample
1890@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1891 overridden by definition
1892@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1893@end smallexample
1894
1895@item
1896Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1897the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1898except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1899@smallexample
1900@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1901 overriding common
1902@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1903@end smallexample
1904
1905@item
1906Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1907@smallexample
1908@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1909 of `@var{symbol}'
1910@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1911@end smallexample
1912
1913@item
1914Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1915@smallexample
1916@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1917 overridden by larger common
1918@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1919@end smallexample
1920
1921@item
1922Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1923the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1924encountered in a different order.
1925@smallexample
1926@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1927 overriding smaller common
1928@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1929@end smallexample
1930@end enumerate
1931
1932@kindex --warn-constructors
1933@item --warn-constructors
1934Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1935object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1936detect the use of global constructors.
1937
1938@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1939@item --warn-multiple-gp
1940Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1941This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1942Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1943section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1944of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1945base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1946base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1947bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1948large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1949values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1950option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1951
1952@kindex --warn-once
1953@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1954@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1955@item --warn-once
1956Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1957which refers to it.
1958
1959@kindex --warn-section-align
1960@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1961@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1962@item --warn-section-align
1963Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1964alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1965The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1966is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1967the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1968
8fdd7217
NC
1969@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1970@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1971Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1972
a0c402a5
L
1973@kindex --warn-alternate-em
1974@item --warn-alternate-em
1975Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1976
560e09e9
NC
1977@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1978@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1979If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1980@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1981This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1982
1983@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1984@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1985This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1986it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1987
252b5132
RH
1988@kindex --whole-archive
1989@cindex including an entire archive
1990@item --whole-archive
1991For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1992@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1993in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1994files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1995library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1996library. This option may be used more than once.
1997
7ec229ce 1998Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1999about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2000Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2001list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2002your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2003
2509a395
SL
2004@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2005@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2006Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2007@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2008undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2009@var{symbol}.
2010
2011This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2012wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2013wishes to call the system function, it should call
2014@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2015
2016Here is a trivial example:
2017
2018@smallexample
2019void *
cc2f008e 2020__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2021@{
cc2f008e 2022 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2023 return __real_malloc (c);
2024@}
2025@end smallexample
2026
ff5dcc92 2027If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2028all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2029instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2030call the real @code{malloc} function.
2031
2032You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2033links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2034you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2035file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2036call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2037
6aa29e7b
JJ
2038@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2039@item --eh-frame-hdr
2040Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2041@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2042
6c1439be
L
2043@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2044@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2045@item --enable-new-dtags
2046@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2047This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2048systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2049@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2050If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2051created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2052those options are only available for ELF systems.
2053
2d643429 2054@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2055@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2056Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2057close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2058time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2059increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2060value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2061
fdc90cb4
JJ
2062@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2063@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2064Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2065@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2066new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2067the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2068hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2069
35835446
JR
2070@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2071@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2072This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2073linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2074for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2075about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2076
4f9c04f7 2077Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20781021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2079run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2080has been used.
2081
2082The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2083enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2084
c0065db7
RM
2085@kindex --build-id
2086@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2087@item --build-id
2088@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2089Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2090The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2091file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2092@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2093parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2094@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2095@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2096an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2097characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2098omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2099
2100The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2101that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2102unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2103to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2104file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2105string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2106
2107Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2108@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2109@end table
2110
0285c67d
NC
2111@c man end
2112
36f63dca 2113@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2114
0285c67d
NC
2115@c man begin OPTIONS
2116
ff5dcc92 2117The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2118the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2119normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2120use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2121@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2122like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2123symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2124object file).
2125
2126In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2127support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2128PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2129values by either a space or an equals sign.
2130
ff5dcc92 2131@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2132
2133@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2134@item --add-stdcall-alias
2135If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2136as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2137[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2138
2139@kindex --base-file
2140@item --base-file @var{file}
2141Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2142addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2143@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2144[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2145
2146@kindex --dll
2147@item --dll
2148Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2149@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2150file.
bb10df36 2151[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2152
88183869
DK
2153@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2154@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2155@item --enable-long-section-names
2156@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2157The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2158the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2159for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2160fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2161to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2162allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2163disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2164generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2165as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2166with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2167GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2168information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2169option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2170section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2171when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2172image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2173[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2174
252b5132
RH
2175@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2176@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2177@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2178@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2179If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2180do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2181only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2182resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2183undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2184@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2185to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2186warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2187import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2188to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2189feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2190@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2191mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2192[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2193
2194@cindex DLLs, creating
2195@kindex --export-all-symbols
2196@item --export-all-symbols
2197If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2198be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2199otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2200explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2201attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2202option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2203@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2204@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2205exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2206re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2207such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2208@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2209@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2210Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2211not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2212extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2213(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2214These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2215@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2216@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2217@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2218@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2219[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2220
2221@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2222@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2223Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2224exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2225[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2226
2927aaca
NC
2227@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2228@item --exclude-all-symbols
2229Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2230[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2231
252b5132
RH
2232@kindex --file-alignment
2233@item --file-alignment
2234Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2235file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2236512.
bb10df36 2237[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2238
2239@cindex heap size
2240@kindex --heap
2241@item --heap @var{reserve}
2242@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2243Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2244to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2245committed.
bb10df36 2246[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2247
2248@cindex image base
2249@kindex --image-base
2250@item --image-base @var{value}
2251Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2252the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2253is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2254your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2255other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2256for dlls.
bb10df36 2257[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2258
2259@kindex --kill-at
2260@item --kill-at
2261If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2262symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2263[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2264
26d2d8a2
BF
2265@kindex --large-address-aware
2266@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2267If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2268header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2269greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2270or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2271section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2272[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2273
252b5132
RH
2274@kindex --major-image-version
2275@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2276Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2277[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2278
2279@kindex --major-os-version
2280@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2281Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2282[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2283
2284@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2285@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2286Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2287[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2288
2289@kindex --minor-image-version
2290@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2291Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2292[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2293
2294@kindex --minor-os-version
2295@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2296Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2297[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2298
2299@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2300@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2301Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2302[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2303
2304@cindex DEF files, creating
2305@cindex DLLs, creating
2306@kindex --output-def
2307@item --output-def @var{file}
2308The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2309file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2310(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2311library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2312automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2313[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2314
b044cda1
CW
2315@cindex DLLs, creating
2316@kindex --out-implib
2317@item --out-implib @var{file}
2318The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2319import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2320import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2321may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2322makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2323creation step.
bb10df36 2324[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2325
2326@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2327@item --enable-auto-image-base
2328Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2329using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2330from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2331collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2332avoided.
bb10df36 2333[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2334
2335@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2336@item --disable-auto-image-base
2337Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2338user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2339default.
bb10df36 2340[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2341
2342@cindex DLLs, linking to
2343@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2344@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2345When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2346search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2347@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2348between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2349uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2350@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2351[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2352
2353@kindex --enable-auto-import
2354@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2355Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2356DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2357building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2358'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2359to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2360specification published by Microsoft.
2361
e2a83dd0
NC
2362Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2363data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2364placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2365around a problem with consts that is described here:
2366http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2367
4d8907ac
DS
2368Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2369see this message:
0d888aac 2370
ece2d90e 2371"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2372documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2373
ece2d90e
NC
2374This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2375ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2376allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2377fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2378constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2379multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2380this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2381of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2382the warning, and exit.
2383
2384There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2385data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2386
2fa9fc65
NC
2387One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2388of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2389this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2390
c0065db7
RM
2391A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2392that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2393there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2394a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2395
2396@example
2397extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2398extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2399 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2400@end example
2401
2402or
2403
2404@example
2405extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2406extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2407 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2408@end example
2409
c0065db7 2410For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2411is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2412
2413@example
2414extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2415extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2416 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2417@end example
2418
c406afaf
NC
2419or
2420
2421@example
2422extern long long extern_ll;
2423extern_ll -->
2424 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2425@end example
2426
2fa9fc65 2427A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2428'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2429@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2430requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2431building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2432merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2433between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2434constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2435
2436Original:
2437@example
2438--foo.h
2439extern int arr[];
2440--foo.c
2441#include "foo.h"
2442void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2443 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2444@}
2445@end example
2446
2447Solution 1:
2448@example
2449--foo.h
2450extern int arr[];
2451--foo.c
2452#include "foo.h"
2453void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2454 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2455 volatile int *parr = arr;
2456 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2457@}
2458@end example
2459
2460Solution 2:
2461@example
2462--foo.h
2463/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2464#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2465 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2466#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2467#else
2468#define FOO_IMPORT
2469#endif
2470extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2471--foo.c
2472#include "foo.h"
2473void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2474 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2475@}
2476@end example
2477
c0065db7 2478A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2479library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2480for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2481functions).
bb10df36 2482[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2483
2484@kindex --disable-auto-import
2485@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2486Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2487@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2488[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2489
2fa9fc65
NC
2490@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2491@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2492If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2493that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2494a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2495environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2496[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2497
2498@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2499@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2500Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2501DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2502[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2503
b044cda1
CW
2504@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2505@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2506Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2507[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2508
252b5132
RH
2509@kindex --section-alignment
2510@item --section-alignment
2511Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2512addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2513[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2514
2515@cindex stack size
2516@kindex --stack
2517@item --stack @var{reserve}
2518@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2519Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2520to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2521committed.
bb10df36 2522[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2523
2524@kindex --subsystem
2525@item --subsystem @var{which}
2526@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2527@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2528Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2529legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2530@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2531the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2532@var{which}.
bb10df36 2533[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2534
2f563b51
DK
2535The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2536of the PE file header:
2537[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2538
2539@kindex --dynamicbase
2540@item --dynamicbase
2541The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2542randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2543Vista for i386 PE targets.
2544
2545@kindex --forceinteg
2546@item --forceinteg
2547Code integrity checks are enforced.
2548
2549@kindex --nxcompat
2550@item --nxcompat
2551The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2552This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2553
2554@kindex --no-isolation
2555@item --no-isolation
2556Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2557
2558@kindex --no-seh
2559@item --no-seh
2560The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2561this image.
2562
2563@kindex --no-bind
2564@item --no-bind
2565Do not bind this image.
2566
2567@kindex --wdmdriver
2568@item --wdmdriver
2569The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2570
2571@kindex --tsaware
2572@item --tsaware
2573The image is Terminal Server aware.
2574
252b5132
RH
2575@end table
2576
0285c67d
NC
2577@c man end
2578
93fd0973
SC
2579@ifset M68HC11
2580@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2581
2582@c man begin OPTIONS
2583
2584The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2585memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2586
2587@table @gcctabopt
2588
2589@kindex --no-trampoline
2590@item --no-trampoline
2591This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2592is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2593instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2594
2595@kindex --bank-window
2596@item --bank-window @var{name}
2597This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2598the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2599The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2600paging and addresses within the memory window.
2601
2602@end table
2603
2604@c man end
2605@end ifset
2606
7fb9f789
NC
2607@ifset M68K
2608@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2609
2610@c man begin OPTIONS
2611
2612The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2613when linking for 68K targets.
2614
2615@table @gcctabopt
2616
2617@kindex --got
2618@item --got=@var{type}
2619This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2620@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2621@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2622Info entry for @file{ld}.
2623
2624@end table
2625
2626@c man end
2627@end ifset
2628
252b5132
RH
2629@ifset UsesEnvVars
2630@node Environment
2631@section Environment Variables
2632
0285c67d
NC
2633@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2634
560e09e9 2635You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2636@ifclear SingleFormat
2637@code{GNUTARGET},
2638@end ifclear
2639@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2640
36f63dca 2641@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2642@kindex GNUTARGET
2643@cindex default input format
2644@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2645use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2646of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2647@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2648of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2649attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2650this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2651there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2652object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2653BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2654in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2655@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2656
2657@kindex LDEMULATION
2658@cindex default emulation
2659@cindex emulation, default
2660@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2661@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2662behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2663available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2664the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2665variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2666linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2667
2668@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2669@cindex demangling, default
2670Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2671@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2672default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2673a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2674may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2675options.
2676
0285c67d
NC
2677@c man end
2678@end ifset
2679
252b5132
RH
2680@node Scripts
2681@chapter Linker Scripts
2682
2683@cindex scripts
2684@cindex linker scripts
2685@cindex command files
2686Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2687written in the linker command language.
2688
2689The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2690the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2691the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2692more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2693direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2694described below.
2695
2696The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2697yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2698linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2699to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2700such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2701
2702You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2703line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2704default linker script.
2705
2706You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2707to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2708Linker Scripts}.
2709
2710@menu
2711* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2712* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2713* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2714* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2715* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2716* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2717* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2718* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2719* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2720* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2721* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2722@end menu
2723
2724@node Basic Script Concepts
2725@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2726@cindex linker script concepts
2727We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2728describe the linker script language.
2729
2730The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2731file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2732@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2733The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2734purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2735among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2736section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2737in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2738
2739Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2740also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2741contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2742the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2743A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2744area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2745loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2746which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2747of debugging information.
2748
2749Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2750first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2751the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2752@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2753section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2754same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2755is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2756(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2757based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2758RAM address would be the VMA.
2759
2760You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2761program with the @samp{-h} option.
2762
2763Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2764@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2765has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2766information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2767will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2768static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2769referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2770
2771You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2772program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2773option.
2774
2775@node Script Format
2776@section Linker Script Format
2777@cindex linker script format
2778Linker scripts are text files.
2779
2780You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2781either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2782symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2783generally ignored.
2784
2785Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2786If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2787otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2788double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2789file name.
2790
2791You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2792@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2793to whitespace.
2794
2795@node Simple Example
2796@section Simple Linker Script Example
2797@cindex linker script example
2798@cindex example of linker script
2799Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2800
2801The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2802@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2803memory layout of the output file.
2804
2805The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2806describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2807code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2808@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2809Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2810your input files.
2811
2812For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28130x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2814linker script which will do that:
2815@smallexample
2816SECTIONS
2817@{
2818 . = 0x10000;
2819 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2820 . = 0x8000000;
2821 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2822 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2823@}
2824@end smallexample
2825
2826You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2827followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2828descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2829
252b5132
RH
2830The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2831sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2832counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2833other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2834current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2835incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2836@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2837
2838The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2839required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2840after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2841which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2842wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2843means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2844
2845Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2846@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2847@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2848
2849The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2850the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2851at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2852output section, the value of the location counter will be
2853@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2854effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2855immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2856
2857The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2858alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2859example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2860sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2861may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2862sections.
2863
2864That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2865
2866@node Simple Commands
2867@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2868@cindex linker script simple commands
2869In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2870
2871@menu
2872* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2873* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2874@ifclear SingleFormat
2875* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2876@end ifclear
2877
4a93e180 2878* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2879* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2880@end menu
2881
2882@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2883@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2884@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2885@cindex start of execution
2886@cindex first instruction
2887@cindex entry point
2888The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2889point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2890entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2891@smallexample
2892ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2893@end smallexample
2894
2895There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2896entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2897stopping when one of them succeeds:
2898@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2899@item
252b5132 2900the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2901@item
252b5132 2902the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2903@item
252b5132 2904the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2905@item
252b5132 2906the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2907@item
252b5132
RH
2908The address @code{0}.
2909@end itemize
2910
2911@node File Commands
36f63dca 2912@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2913@cindex linker script file commands
2914Several linker script commands deal with files.
2915
2916@table @code
2917@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2918@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2919@cindex including a linker script
2920Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2921be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2922with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
292310 levels deep.
2924
4006703d
NS
2925You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2926@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2927
252b5132
RH
2928@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2929@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2930@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2931@cindex input files in linker scripts
2932@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2933@cindex linker script input object files
2934The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2935in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2936
2937For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2938a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2939then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2940
2941In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2942script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2943
e3f2db7f
AO
2944In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2945with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2946located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2947for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2948open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2949linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2950description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2951
ff5dcc92 2952If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2953name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2954@samp{-l}.
2955
2956When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2957files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2958script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2959
2960@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2961@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2962@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2963@cindex grouping input files
2964The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2965files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2966new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2967in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2968
b717d30e
JJ
2969@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2970@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2971@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2972This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2973commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2974as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2975with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2976when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2977@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2978and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2979setting afterwards.
2980
252b5132
RH
2981@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2982@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2983@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2984The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2985@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2986@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2987Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2988precedence.
2989
2990You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2991output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2992
2993@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2994@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2995@cindex library search path in linker script
2996@cindex archive search path in linker script
2997@cindex search path in linker script
2998The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2999@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3000@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3001on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3002are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3003the command line option are searched first.
3004
3005@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3006@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3007@cindex first input file
3008The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3009that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3010though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3011when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3012first file.
3013@end table
3014
3015@ifclear SingleFormat
3016@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3017@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3018A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3019
3020@table @code
3021@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3022@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3023@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3024@cindex output file format in linker script
3025The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3026output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3027exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3028(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3029line option takes precedence.
3030
3031You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3032formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3033This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3034desired endianness.
3035
3036If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3037will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3038output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3039used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3040
3041For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3042command:
3043@smallexample
3044OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3045@end smallexample
3046This says that the default format for the output file is
3047@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3048option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3049format.
3050
3051@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3052@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3053@cindex input file format in linker script
3054The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3055files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3056This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3057(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3058is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3059command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3060@end table
3061@end ifclear
3062
4a93e180
NC
3063@node REGION_ALIAS
3064@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3065@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3066@cindex region alias
3067@cindex region names
3068
3069Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3070@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3071
3072@smallexample
3073REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3074@end smallexample
3075
3076The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3077memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3078to memory regions. An example follows.
3079
3080Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3081memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3082that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3083non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3084access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3085read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3086sections:
3087
3088@itemize @bullet
3089@item
3090@code{.text} program code;
3091@item
3092@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3093@item
3094@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3095@item
3096@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3097@end itemize
3098
3099The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3100part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3101output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3102systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3103@code{C}:
3104@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3105@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3106@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3107@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3108@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3109@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3110@end multitable
3111The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3112loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3113the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3114the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3115
3116The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3117includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3118memory layout:
3119@smallexample
3120INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3121
3122SECTIONS
3123 @{
3124 .text :
3125 @{
3126 *(.text)
3127 @} > REGION_TEXT
3128 .rodata :
3129 @{
3130 *(.rodata)
3131 rodata_end = .;
3132 @} > REGION_RODATA
3133 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3134 @{
3135 data_start = .;
3136 *(.data)
3137 @} > REGION_DATA
3138 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3139 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3140 .bss :
3141 @{
3142 *(.bss)
3143 @} > REGION_BSS
3144 @}
3145@end smallexample
3146
3147Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3148regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3149variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3150@table @code
3151@item A
3152Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3153@smallexample
3154MEMORY
3155 @{
3156 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3157 @}
3158
3159REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3160REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3161REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3162REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3163@end smallexample
3164@item B
3165Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3166into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3167@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3168@smallexample
3169MEMORY
3170 @{
3171 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3172 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3173 @}
3174
3175REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3176REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3177REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3178REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3179@end smallexample
3180@item C
3181Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3182@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3183initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3184system start into the @code{RAM}.
3185@smallexample
3186MEMORY
3187 @{
3188 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3189 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3190 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3191 @}
3192
3193REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3194REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3195REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3196REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3197@end smallexample
3198@end table
3199
3200It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3201@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3202necessary:
3203@smallexample
3204#include <string.h>
3205
3206extern char data_start [];
3207extern char data_size [];
3208extern char data_load_start [];
3209
3210void copy_data(void)
3211@{
3212 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3213 @{
3214 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3215 @}
3216@}
3217@end smallexample
3218
252b5132 3219@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3220@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3221There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3222
3223@table @code
3224@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3225@kindex ASSERT
3226@cindex assertion in linker script
3227Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3228with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3229
3230@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3231@kindex EXTERN
3232@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3233Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3234symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3235modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3236each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3237command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3238
3239@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3240@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3241@cindex common allocation in linker script
3242This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3243to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3244output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3245
4818e05f
AM
3246@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3247@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3248@cindex common allocation in linker script
3249This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3250command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3251to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3252
53d25da6
AM
3253@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3254@kindex INSERT
3255@cindex insert user script into default script
3256This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3257augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3258inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3259@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3260default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3261sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3262linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3263insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3264linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3265default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3266of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3267to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3268is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3269
3270@smallexample
3271SECTIONS
3272@{
3273 OVERLAY :
3274 @{
3275 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3276 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3277 @}
3278@}
3279INSERT AFTER .text;
3280@end smallexample
3281
252b5132
RH
3282@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3283@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3284@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3285This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3286references among certain output sections.
3287
3288In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3289using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3290will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3291errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3292a function defined in the other section.
3293
3294The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3295@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3296an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3297@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3298names.
3299
3300@ifclear SingleFormat
3301@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3302@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3303@cindex machine architecture
3304@cindex architecture
3305Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3306of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3307architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3308the @samp{-f} option.
3309@end ifclear
3310@end table
3311
3312@node Assignments
3313@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3314@cindex assignment in scripts
3315@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3316@cindex variables, defining
3317You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3318the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3319
3320@menu
3321* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3322* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3323* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3324* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3325@end menu
3326
3327@node Simple Assignments
3328@subsection Simple Assignments
3329
3330You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3331
3332@table @code
3333@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3334@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3335@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3336@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3337@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3338@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3339@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3340@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3341@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3342@end table
3343
3344The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3345@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3346defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3347
3348The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3349may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3350
3351The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3352
3353Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3354
3355You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3356statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3357section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3358
3359The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3360expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3361
3362Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3363assignments may be used:
3364
3365@smallexample
3366floating_point = 0;
3367SECTIONS
3368@{
3369 .text :
3370 @{
3371 *(.text)
3372 _etext = .;
3373 @}
156e34dd 3374 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3375 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3376@}
3377@end smallexample
3378@noindent
3379In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3380zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3381the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3382defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3383upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3384
3385@node PROVIDE
3386@subsection PROVIDE
3387@cindex PROVIDE
3388In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3389only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3390the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3391@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3392@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3393@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3394@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3395@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3396
3397Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3398@smallexample
3399SECTIONS
3400@{
3401 .text :
3402 @{
3403 *(.text)
3404 _etext = .;
3405 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3406 @}
3407@}
3408@end smallexample
3409
3410In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3411underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3412the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3413underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3414If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3415linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3416
7af8e998
L
3417@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3418@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3419@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3420Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3421hidden and won't be exported.
3422
73ae6183
NC
3423@node Source Code Reference
3424@subsection Source Code Reference
3425
3426Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3427intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3428a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3429symbol that does not have a value.
3430
3431Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3432transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3433stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3434prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3435mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3436of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3437variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3438linker script variable might be referred to as:
3439
3440@smallexample
3441 extern int foo;
3442@end smallexample
3443
3444But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3445
3446@smallexample
3447 _foo = 1000;
3448@end smallexample
3449
3450In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3451transformation has taken place.
3452
3453When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3454things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3455in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3456second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3457table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3458contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3459value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3460
3461@smallexample
3462 int foo = 1000;
3463@end smallexample
3464
3465creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3466holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3467number 1000 is initially stored.
3468
3469When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3470first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3471memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3472So:
3473
3474@smallexample
3475 foo = 1;
3476@end smallexample
3477
3478looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3479associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3480address. Whereas:
3481
3482@smallexample
3483 int * a = & foo;
3484@end smallexample
3485
3486looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3487and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3488the variable @samp{a}.
3489
3490Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3491the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3492an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3493
3494@smallexample
3495 foo = 1000;
3496@end smallexample
3497
3498creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3499the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3500address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3501linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3502access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3503
3504Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3505you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3506use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3507section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3508linker script contains these declarations:
3509
3510@smallexample
3511@group
3512 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3513 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3514 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3515@end group
3516@end smallexample
3517
3518Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3519
3520@smallexample
3521@group
3522 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3523
73ae6183
NC
3524 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3525@end group
3526@end smallexample
3527
3528Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3529
252b5132 3530@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3531@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3532@kindex SECTIONS
3533The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3534into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3535
3536The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3537@smallexample
3538SECTIONS
3539@{
3540 @var{sections-command}
3541 @var{sections-command}
3542 @dots{}
3543@}
3544@end smallexample
3545
3546Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3547
3548@itemize @bullet
3549@item
3550an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3551@item
3552a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3553@item
3554an output section description
3555@item
3556an overlay description
3557@end itemize
3558
3559The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3560@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3561those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3562understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3563the layout of the output file.
3564
3565Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3566below.
3567
3568If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3569linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3570section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3571input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3572example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3573in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3574
3575@menu
3576* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3577* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3578* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3579* Input Section:: Input section description
3580* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3581* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3582* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3583* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3584* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3585@end menu
3586
3587@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3588@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3589The full description of an output section looks like this:
3590@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3591@group
7e7d5768 3592@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3593 [AT(@var{lma})]
3594 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3595 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3596 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3597 @{
3598 @var{output-section-command}
3599 @var{output-section-command}
3600 @dots{}
562d3460 3601 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3602@end group
3603@end smallexample
3604
3605Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3606
3607The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3608name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3609The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3610
3611Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3612
3613@itemize @bullet
3614@item
3615a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3616@item
3617an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3618@item
3619data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3620@item
3621a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3622@end itemize
3623
3624@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3625@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3626@cindex name, section
3627@cindex section name
3628The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3629meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3630support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3631must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3632example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3633output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3634names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3635quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3636characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3637commas must be quoted.
3638
3639The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3640Discarding}.
3641
3642@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3643@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3644@cindex address, section
3645@cindex section address
3646The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3647address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3648the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3649based on the current value of the location counter.
3650
3651If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3652set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3653@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3654current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3655requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3656output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3657within the output section.
3658
3659For example,
3660@smallexample
3661.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3662@end smallexample
3663@noindent
3664and
3665@smallexample
3666.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3667@end smallexample
3668@noindent
3669are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3670@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3671counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3672counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3673section.
3674
3675The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3676For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3677so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3678do something like this:
3679@smallexample
3680.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3681@end smallexample
3682@noindent
3683This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3684aligned upward to the specified value.
3685
3686Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3687location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3688sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3689
3690@node Input Section
36f63dca 3691@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3692@cindex input sections
3693@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3694The most common output section command is an input section description.
3695
3696The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3697You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3698in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3699map the input files into your memory layout.
3700
3701@menu
3702* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3703* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3704* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3705* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3706* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3707@end menu
3708
3709@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3710@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3711@cindex input section basics
3712An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3713by a list of section names in parentheses.
3714
3715The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3716describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3717
3718The most common input section description is to include all input
3719sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3720include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3721@smallexample
3722*(.text)
3723@end smallexample
3724@noindent
18625d54
CM
3725Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3726of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3727match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3728example:
252b5132 3729@smallexample
b4346c09 3730*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3731@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3732will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3733@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3734
3735There are two ways to include more than one section:
3736@smallexample
3737*(.text .rdata)
3738*(.text) *(.rdata)
3739@end smallexample
3740@noindent
3741The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3742@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3743first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3744they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3745@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3746@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3747
3748You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3749You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3750needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3751@smallexample
3752data.o(.data)
3753@end smallexample
3754
967928e9
AM
3755You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3756matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3757with no whitespace around the colon.
3758
3759@table @samp
3760@item archive:file
3761matches file within archive
3762@item archive:
3763matches the whole archive
3764@item :file
3765matches file but not one in an archive
3766@end table
3767
3768Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3769wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3770single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3771@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3772within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3773also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3774other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3775from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3776command.
3777
252b5132
RH
3778If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3779the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3780commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3781@smallexample
3782data.o
3783@end smallexample
3784
967928e9
AM
3785When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3786and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3787characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3788name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3789did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3790though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3791@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3792the archive search path.
3793
3794@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3795@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3796@cindex input section wildcards
3797@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3798@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3799@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3800In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3801name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3802
3803The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3804pattern for the file name.
3805
3806The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3807
3808@table @samp
3809@item *
3810matches any number of characters
3811@item ?
3812matches any single character
3813@item [@var{chars}]
3814matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3815character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3816@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3817@item \
3818quotes the following character
3819@end table
3820
3821When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3822will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3823Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3824exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3825@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3826a @samp{/} character.
3827
3828File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3829specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3830does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3831
3832If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3833appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3834will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3835sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3836@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3837@smallexample
3838.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3839.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3840@end smallexample
3841
bcaa7b3e 3842@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3843Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3844in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3845this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3846pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3847@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3848into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3849
bcaa7b3e
L
3850@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3851@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3852difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3853ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3854
3855@cindex SORT
3856@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3857
3858When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3859can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3860
3861@enumerate
3862@item
3863@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3864It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3865sections have the same name.
3866@item
3867@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3868It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3869sections have the same alignment.
3870@item
c0065db7 3871@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3872treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3873@item
3874@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3875is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3876@item
3877All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3878@end enumerate
3879
3880When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3881section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3882takes precedence over the command line option.
3883
3884If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3885command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3886treated as nested sorting command.
3887
3888@enumerate
3889@item
3890@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3891@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3892@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3893@item
3894@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3895@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3896@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3897@end enumerate
3898
3899If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3900command line option will be ignored.
3901
252b5132
RH
3902If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3903@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3904precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3905
3906This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3907files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3908sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3909The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3910with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3911linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3912@smallexample
3913@group
3914SECTIONS @{
3915 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3916 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3917 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3918 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3919@}
3920@end group
3921@end smallexample
3922
3923@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3924@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3925@cindex common symbol placement
3926@cindex uninitialized data placement
3927A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3928file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3929linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3930named @samp{COMMON}.
3931
3932You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3933other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3934particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3935input files are placed in another section.
3936
3937In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3938@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3939@smallexample
3940.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3941@end smallexample
3942
3943@cindex scommon section
3944@cindex small common symbols
3945Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3946example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3947symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3948different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3949the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3950symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3951to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3952locations.
3953
3954@cindex [COMMON]
3955You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3956notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3957@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3958
3959@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3960@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3961@cindex KEEP
3962@cindex garbage collection
3963When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3964it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3965This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3966with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3967@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3968
3969@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3970@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3971The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3972to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3973start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3974@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3975follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3976@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3977@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3978All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3979files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3980
3981@smallexample
3982@group
3983SECTIONS @{
3984 outputa 0x10000 :
3985 @{
3986 all.o
3987 foo.o (.input1)
3988 @}
36f63dca
NC
3989@end group
3990@group
252b5132
RH
3991 outputb :
3992 @{
3993 foo.o (.input2)
3994 foo1.o (.input1)
3995 @}
36f63dca
NC
3996@end group
3997@group
252b5132
RH
3998 outputc :
3999 @{
4000 *(.input1)
4001 *(.input2)
4002 @}
4003@}
4004@end group
a1ab1d2a 4005@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4006
4007@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4008@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4009@cindex data
4010@cindex section data
4011@cindex output section data
4012@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4013@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4014@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4015@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4016@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4017You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4018@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4019an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4020parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4021value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4022counter.
4023
4024The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4025store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4026bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4027stored.
4028
4029For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4030of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4031@smallexample
4032BYTE(1)
4033LONG(addr)
4034@end smallexample
4035
4036When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4037same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4038target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4039@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4040@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4041
4042If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4043which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4044When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4045true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4046endianness of the first input object file.
4047
36f63dca 4048Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4049between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4050@smallexample
4051SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4052@end smallexample
4053whereas this will work:
4054@smallexample
4055SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4056@end smallexample
4057
252b5132
RH
4058@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4059@cindex holes, filling
4060@cindex unspecified memory
4061You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4062current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4063otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4064gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4065with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4066necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4067point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4068than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4069different parts of an output section.
4070
4071This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4072value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4073@smallexample
563e308f 4074FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4075@end smallexample
4076
4077The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4078section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4079part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4080entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4081precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4082expression.
252b5132
RH
4083
4084@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4085@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4086There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4087commands.
4088
4089@table @code
4090@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4091@cindex input filename symbols
4092@cindex filename symbols
4093@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4094The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4095The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4096file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4097the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4098
4099This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4100normally used for any other object file format.
4101
4102@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4103@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4104@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4105@item CONSTRUCTORS
4106When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4107unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4108destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4109arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4110automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4111For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4112linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4113@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4114ignored for other object file formats.
4115
4116The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4117constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4118Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4119the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4120first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4121of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4122compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4123formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4124@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4125the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4126destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4127@code{exit}.
4128
4129For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4130arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4131addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4132and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4133linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4134runtime code expects to see.
4135
4136@smallexample
4137 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4138 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4139 *(.ctors)
4140 LONG(0)
4141 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4142 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4143 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4144 *(.dtors)
4145 LONG(0)
4146 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4147@end smallexample
4148
4149If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4150which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4151are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4152are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4153command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4154@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4155@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4156@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4157
4158Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4159and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4160need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4161scripts.
4162
4163@end table
4164
4165@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4166@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4167@cindex discarding sections
4168@cindex sections, discarding
4169@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4170The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4171for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4172be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4173@smallexample
49c13adb 4174.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4175@end smallexample
4176@noindent
4177will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4178@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4179sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4180space in an output section will also create the output section.
4181
a0976ea4 4182The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4183on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4184symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4185the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4186section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4187
4188@cindex /DISCARD/
4189The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4190input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4191section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4192
4193@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4194@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4195@cindex output section attributes
4196We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4197like this:
0c71d759 4198
252b5132 4199@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4200@group
7e7d5768 4201@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4202 [AT(@var{lma})]
4203 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4204 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4205 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4206 @{
4207 @var{output-section-command}
4208 @var{output-section-command}
4209 @dots{}
562d3460 4210 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4211@end group
4212@end smallexample
0c71d759 4213
252b5132
RH
4214We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4215@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4216remaining section attributes.
4217
a1ab1d2a 4218@menu
252b5132
RH
4219* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4220* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4221* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4222* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4223* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4224* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4225* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4226* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4227@end menu
4228
4229@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4230@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4231Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4232parentheses. The following types are defined:
4233
4234@table @code
4235@item NOLOAD
4236The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4237loaded into memory when the program is run.
4238@item DSECT
4239@itemx COPY
4240@itemx INFO
4241@itemx OVERLAY
4242These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4243rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4244marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4245section when the program is run.
4246@end table
4247
4248@kindex NOLOAD
4249@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4250@cindex loading, preventing
4251The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4252the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4253the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4254@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4255need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4256@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4257@smallexample
4258@group
4259SECTIONS @{
4260 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4261 @dots{}
4262@}
4263@end group
4264@end smallexample
4265
4266@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4267@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4268@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4269@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4270@cindex load address
4271@cindex section load address
4272Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4273@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4274an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4275Address}).
4276
dc0b6aa0
AM
4277The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4278the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4279
4280Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4281specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4282Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4283linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4284
4285If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4286section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4287VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4288section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4289or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4290to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4291@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4292
4293@cindex ROM initialized data
4294@cindex initialized data in ROM
4295This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4296example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4297called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4298@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4299even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4300uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4301defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4302counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4303
4304@smallexample
4305@group
4306SECTIONS
4307 @{
4308 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4309 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4310 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4311 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4312 .bss 0x3000 :
4313 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4314@}
4315@end group
4316@end smallexample
4317
4318The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4319this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4320the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4321how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4322script.
4323
4324@smallexample
4325@group
4326extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4327char *src = &_etext;
4328char *dst = &_data;
4329
4330/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4331while (dst < &_edata) @{
4332 *dst++ = *src++;
4333@}
4334
4335/* Zero bss */
4336for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4337 *dst = 0;
4338@end group
4339@end smallexample
4340
bbf115d3
L
4341@node Forced Output Alignment
4342@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4343@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4344@cindex forcing output section alignment
4345@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4346You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4347
7e7d5768
AM
4348@node Forced Input Alignment
4349@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4350@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4351@cindex forcing input section alignment
4352@cindex input section alignment
4353You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4354SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4355sections, whether larger or smaller.
4356
0c71d759
NC
4357@node Output Section Constraint
4358@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4359@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4360@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4361@cindex constraints on output sections
4362You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4363of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4364read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4365@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4366
252b5132 4367@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4368@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4369@kindex >@var{region}
4370@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4371@cindex memory regions and sections
4372You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4373using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4374
4375Here is a simple example:
4376@smallexample
4377@group
4378MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4379SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4380@end group
4381@end smallexample
4382
4383@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4384@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4385@kindex :@var{phdr}
4386@cindex section, assigning to program header
4387@cindex program headers and sections
4388You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4389using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4390one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4391assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4392@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4393linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4394
4395Here is a simple example:
4396@smallexample
4397@group
4398PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4399SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4400@end group
4401@end smallexample
4402
4403@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4404@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4405@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4406@cindex section fill pattern
4407@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4408You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4409@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4410(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4411within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4412alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4413necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4414of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4415an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4416fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4417other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4418pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4419expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4420
4421You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4422output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4423
4424Here is a simple example:
4425@smallexample
4426@group
563e308f 4427SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4428@end group
4429@end smallexample
4430
4431@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4432@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4433@kindex OVERLAY
4434@cindex overlays
4435An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4436are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4437the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4438copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4439required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4440can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4441than another.
4442
4443Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4444@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4445output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4446command is as follows:
4447@smallexample
4448@group
4449OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4450 @{
4451 @var{secname1}
4452 @{
4453 @var{output-section-command}
4454 @var{output-section-command}
4455 @dots{}
4456 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4457 @var{secname2}
4458 @{
4459 @var{output-section-command}
4460 @var{output-section-command}
4461 @dots{}
4462 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4463 @dots{}
4464 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4465@end group
4466@end smallexample
4467
4468Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4469section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4470section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4471those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4472except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4473sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4474
4475The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4476addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4477memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4478whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4479and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4480and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4481
4482If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4483among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4484all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4485section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4486NOCROSSREFS}.
4487
4488For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4489provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4490defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4491@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4492the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4493within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4494symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4495
4496At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4497the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4498
4499Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4500@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4501@smallexample
4502@group
4503 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4504 @{
4505 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4506 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4507 @}
4508@end group
4509@end smallexample
4510@noindent
4511This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4512address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4513@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4514following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4515@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4516@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4517
4518C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4519like the following.
4520
4521@smallexample
4522@group
4523 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4524 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4525 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4526@end group
4527@end smallexample
4528
4529Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4530everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4531example could have been written identically as follows.
4532
4533@smallexample
4534@group
4535 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4536 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4537 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4538 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4539 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4540 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4541 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4542@end group
4543@end smallexample
4544
4545@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4546@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4547@kindex MEMORY
4548@cindex memory regions
4549@cindex regions of memory
4550@cindex allocating memory
4551@cindex discontinuous memory
4552The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4553memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4554
4555The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4556memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4557may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4558can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4559set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4560regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4561around to fit into the available regions.
4562
4563A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4564command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4565you wish. The syntax is:
4566@smallexample
4567@group
a1ab1d2a 4568MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4569 @{
4570 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4571 @dots{}
4572 @}
4573@end group
4574@end smallexample
4575
4576The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4577region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4578Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4579with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4580must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4581add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4582command.
252b5132
RH
4583
4584@cindex memory region attributes
4585The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4586whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4587not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4588@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4589section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4590the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4591them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4592
4593The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4594@table @samp
4595@item R
4596Read-only section
4597@item W
4598Read/write section
4599@item X
4600Executable section
4601@item A
4602Allocatable section
4603@item I
4604Initialized section
4605@item L
4606Same as @samp{I}
4607@item !
4608Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4609@end table
4610
4611If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4612@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4613attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4614in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4615attributes.
4616
4617@kindex ORIGIN =
4618@kindex o =
4619@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4620The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4621the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4622cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4623abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4624@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4625
4626@kindex LENGTH =
4627@kindex len =
4628@kindex l =
4629The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4630region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4631be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4632@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4633
4634In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4635available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4636and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4637linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4638is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4639or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4640explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4641region.
4642
4643@smallexample
4644@group
a1ab1d2a 4645MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4646 @{
4647 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4648 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4649 @}
4650@end group
4651@end smallexample
4652
4653Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4654specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4655@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4656a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4657output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4658was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4659the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4660output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4661region, the linker will issue an error message.
4662
3ec57632 4663It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4664expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4665@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4666
4667@smallexample
4668@group
c0065db7 4669 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4670@end group
4671@end smallexample
4672
252b5132
RH
4673@node PHDRS
4674@section PHDRS Command
4675@kindex PHDRS
4676@cindex program headers
4677@cindex ELF program headers
4678@cindex program segments
4679@cindex segments, ELF
4680The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4681@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4682loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4683program with the @samp{-p} option.
4684
4685When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4686reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4687program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4688This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4689interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4690
4691The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4692in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4693precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4694the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4695not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4696
4697The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4698generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4699ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4700
4701This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4702@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4703
4704@smallexample
4705@group
4706PHDRS
4707@{
4708 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4709 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4710@}
4711@end group
4712@end smallexample
4713
4714The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4715of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4716header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4717with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4718must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4719is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4720
4721Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4722system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4723specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4724sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4725attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4726Section Phdr}.
4727
4728It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4729merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4730repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4731contain the section.
4732
4733If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4734then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4735not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4736convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4737placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4738default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4739segment at all.
4740
4741@kindex FILEHDR
4742@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4743You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4744the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4745The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4746file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4747include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4748segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4749these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4750
4751The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4752value of the keyword.
4753
4754@table @asis
4755@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4756Indicates an unused program header.
4757
4758@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4759Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4760the file.
4761
4762@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4763Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4764
4765@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4766Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4767found.
4768
4769@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4770Indicates a segment holding note information.
4771
4772@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4773A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4774ABI.
4775
4776@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4777Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4778
4779@item @var{expression}
4780An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4781be used for types not defined above.
4782@end table
4783
4784You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4785in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4786@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4787Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4788output section attribute.
4789
4790The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4791which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4792explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4793an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4794header.
4795
4796Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4797headers used on a native ELF system.
4798
4799@example
4800@group
4801PHDRS
4802@{
4803 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4804 interp PT_INTERP ;
4805 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4806 data PT_LOAD ;
4807 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4808@}
4809
4810SECTIONS
4811@{
4812 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4813 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4814 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4815 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4816 @dots{}
4817 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4818 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4819 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4820 @dots{}
4821@}
4822@end group
4823@end example
4824
4825@node VERSION
4826@section VERSION Command
4827@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4828@cindex symbol versions
4829@cindex version script
4830@cindex versions of symbols
4831The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4832only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4833symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4834a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4835shared library.
4836
4837You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4838you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4839also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4840
4841The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4842@smallexample
4843VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4844@end smallexample
4845
4846The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4847Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4848version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4849version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4850version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4851scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4852library.
4853
4854The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4855examples.
4856
4857@smallexample
4858VERS_1.1 @{
4859 global:
4860 foo1;
4861 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4862 old*;
4863 original*;
4864 new*;
252b5132
RH
4865@};
4866
4867VERS_1.2 @{
4868 foo2;
4869@} VERS_1.1;
4870
4871VERS_2.0 @{
4872 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4873 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4874 ns::*;
4875 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4876 @}
252b5132
RH
4877@} VERS_1.2;
4878@end smallexample
4879
4880This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4881version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4882The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4883a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4884of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4885symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4886is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4887in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4888However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4889name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4890
4891Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4892depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4893to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4894
4895Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4896depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4897and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4898
4899When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4900specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4901unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4902unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4903somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4904wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4905wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4906set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4907ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4908
4909The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4910they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4911could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4912However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4913
0f6bf451 4914Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4915in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4916symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4917won't.
4918
4919@smallexample
7c9c73be 4920@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4921@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4922
252b5132
RH
4923When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4924symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4925requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4926shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4927loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4928linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4929application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4930way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4931all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4932search for each symbol reference.
4933
4934The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4935doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4936that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4937functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4938the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4939required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4940that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4941versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4942the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4943
4944There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4945first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4946source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4947script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4948maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4949@smallexample
4950__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4951@end smallexample
4952@noindent
4953in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4954be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4955The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4956@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4957takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4958
4959The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4960function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4961an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4962version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4963linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4964
4965To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4966source file. Here is an example:
4967
4968@smallexample
4969__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4970__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4971__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4972__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4973@end smallexample
4974
4975In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4976unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4977example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4978@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4979
4980When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4981some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4982this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4983@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4984declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4985you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4986
4987If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4988within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4989(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4990specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4991
cb840a31
L
4992You can also specify the language in the version script:
4993
4994@smallexample
4995VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4996@end smallexample
4997
c0065db7 4998The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4999The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5000demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5001patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
5002
86043bbb
MM
5003Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5004described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5005or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5006the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5007whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5008cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5009might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5010should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5011expect when you upgrade.
5012
252b5132
RH
5013@node Expressions
5014@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5015@cindex expressions
5016@cindex arithmetic
5017The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5018that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5019expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5020host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5021
5022You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5023
5024The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5025expressions.
5026
5027@menu
5028* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5029* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5030* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5031* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5032* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5033* Operators:: Operators
5034* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5035* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5036* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5037@end menu
5038
5039@node Constants
5040@subsection Constants
5041@cindex integer notation
5042@cindex constants in linker scripts
5043All constants are integers.
5044
5045As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5046octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5047hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5048@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5049@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5050value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5051
5052@cindex scaled integers
5053@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5054@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5055@cindex suffixes for integers
5056@cindex integer suffixes
5057In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5058constant by
5059@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5060@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5061@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5062@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5063@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5064@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5065@tex
5066${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5067@end tex
5068@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5069respectively. For example, the following
5070all refer to the same quantity:
5071
252b5132 5072@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5073_fourk_1 = 4K;
5074_fourk_2 = 4096;
5075_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5076_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5077@end smallexample
5078
8a308ae8
NC
5079Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5080conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5081
0c71d759
NC
5082@node Symbolic Constants
5083@subsection Symbolic Constants
5084@cindex symbolic constants
5085@kindex CONSTANT
5086It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5087the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5088
5089@table @code
5090@item MAXPAGESIZE
5091@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5092The target's maximum page size.
5093
5094@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5095@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5096The target's default page size.
5097@end table
5098
5099So for example:
5100
5101@smallexample
5102 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5103@end smallexample
5104
5105will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5106supported by the target.
5107
252b5132
RH
5108@node Symbols
5109@subsection Symbol Names
5110@cindex symbol names
5111@cindex names
5112@cindex quoted symbol names
5113@kindex "
5114Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5115and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5116Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5117specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5118keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5119@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5120"SECTION" = 9;
5121"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5122@end smallexample
5123
5124Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5125to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5126whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5127
ecca9871
L
5128@node Orphan Sections
5129@subsection Orphan Sections
5130@cindex orphan
5131Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5132are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5133script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5134output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5135placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5136attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5137same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5138If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5139at the end of the file.
5140
5141For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5142well as section flag.
5143
41911f68 5144If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5145the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5146__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5147section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5148orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5149representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5150character.
5151
252b5132
RH
5152@node Location Counter
5153@subsection The Location Counter
5154@kindex .
5155@cindex dot
5156@cindex location counter
5157@cindex current output location
5158The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5159current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5160location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5161within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5162anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5163
5164@cindex holes
5165Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5166moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5167location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5168and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5169doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5170
5171@smallexample
5172SECTIONS
5173@{
5174 output :
5175 @{
5176 file1(.text)
5177 . = . + 1000;
5178 file2(.text)
5179 . += 1000;
5180 file3(.text)
563e308f 5181 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5182@}
5183@end smallexample
5184@noindent
5185In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5186located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5187followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5188@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5189@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5190specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5191
5c6bbab8
NC
5192@cindex dot inside sections
5193Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5194current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5195statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5196absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5197however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5198not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5199
5200@smallexample
5201SECTIONS
5202@{
5203 . = 0x100
5204 .text: @{
5205 *(.text)
5206 . = 0x200
5207 @}
5208 . = 0x500
5209 .data: @{
5210 *(.data)
5211 . += 0x600
5212 @}
5213@}
5214@end smallexample
5215
5216The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5217and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5218the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5219much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5220move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5221and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5222the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5223the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5224
b5666f2f
AM
5225@cindex dot outside sections
5226Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5227output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5228needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5229
5230@smallexample
5231SECTIONS
5232@{
5233 start_of_text = . ;
5234 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5235 end_of_text = . ;
5236
5237 start_of_data = . ;
5238 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5239 end_of_data = . ;
5240@}
5241@end smallexample
5242
5243If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5244not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5245between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5246should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5247blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5248the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5249sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5250statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5251special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5252place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5253as follows:
5254
5255@smallexample
5256SECTIONS
5257@{
5258 start_of_text = . ;
5259 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5260 end_of_text = . ;
5261
5262 start_of_data = . ;
5263 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5264 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5265 end_of_data = . ;
5266@}
5267@end smallexample
5268
5269This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5270@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5271placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5272assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5273a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5274section. So you could write:
5275
5276@smallexample
5277SECTIONS
5278@{
5279 start_of_text = . ;
5280 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5281 end_of_text = . ;
5282
5283 . = . ;
5284 start_of_data = . ;
5285 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5286 end_of_data = . ;
5287@}
5288@end smallexample
5289
5290Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5291@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5292
252b5132
RH
5293@need 2000
5294@node Operators
5295@subsection Operators
5296@cindex operators for arithmetic
5297@cindex arithmetic operators
5298@cindex precedence in expressions
5299The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5300the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5301@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5302@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5303@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5304@smallexample
5305precedence associativity Operators Notes
5306(highest)
53071 left ! - ~ (1)
53082 left * / %
53093 left + -
53104 left >> <<
53115 left == != > < <= >=
53126 left &
53137 left |
53148 left &&
53159 left ||
531610 right ? :
531711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5318(lowest)
5319@end smallexample
5320Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5321(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5322(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5323@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5324@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5325@tex
5326\vskip \baselineskip
5327%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5328\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5329\hrule
5330\halign
5331{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5332height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5333&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5334height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5335\noalign{\hrule}
5336height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5337&highest&&&&&\cr
5338% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5339&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5340&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5341&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5342&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5343&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5344&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5345&7&&left&&|&\cr
5346&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5347&9&&left&&||&\cr
5348&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5349&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5350&lowest&&&&&\cr
5351height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5352\hrule}
5353@end tex
5354@iftex
5355{
5356@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5357@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5358@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5359}
5360@end iftex
5361@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5362
5363@node Evaluation
5364@subsection Evaluation
5365@cindex lazy evaluation
5366@cindex expression evaluation order
5367The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5368an expression when absolutely necessary.
5369
5370The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5371address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5372regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5373as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5374
5375However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5376until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5377other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5378for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5379
5380The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5381assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5382allocation.
5383
5384Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5385@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5386
5387If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5388available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5389following
5390@smallexample
5391@group
5392SECTIONS
5393 @{
a1ab1d2a 5394 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5395 @{ *(.text) @}
5396 @}
5397@end group
5398@end smallexample
5399@noindent
5400will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5401address}.
5402
5403@node Expression Section
5404@subsection The Section of an Expression
5405@cindex expression sections
5406@cindex absolute expressions
5407@cindex relative expressions
5408@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5409@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5410@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5411When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5412or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5413fixed offset from the base of a section.
5414
5415The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5416whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5417an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5418section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5419
5420A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5421relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5422further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5423section will be the section of the relative expression.
5424
5425A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5426through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5427will not have any particular associated section.
5428
5429You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5430to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5431create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5432section @samp{.data}:
5433@smallexample
5434SECTIONS
5435 @{
5436 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5437 @}
5438@end smallexample
5439@noindent
5440If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5441@samp{.data} section.
5442
5443@node Builtin Functions
5444@subsection Builtin Functions
5445@cindex functions in expressions
5446The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5447use in linker script expressions.
5448
5449@table @code
5450@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5451@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5452@cindex expression, absolute
5453Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5454of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5455value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5456normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5457
5458@item ADDR(@var{section})
5459@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5460@cindex section address in expression
5461Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5462script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5463the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5464identical values:
5465@smallexample
5466@group
5467SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5468 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5469 @{
252b5132
RH
5470 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5471 @dots{}
5472 @}
5473 .output :
5474 @{
5475 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5476 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5477 @}
5478@dots{} @}
5479@end group
5480@end smallexample
5481
876f4090
NS
5482@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5483@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5484@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5485@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5486@cindex round up location counter
5487@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5488@cindex round up expression
5489@cindex align expression
5490Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5491to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5492doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5493arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5494expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5495equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5496
5497Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5498next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5499variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5500input sections:
252b5132
RH
5501@smallexample
5502@group
5503SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5504 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5505 *(.data)
5506 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5507 @}
5508@dots{} @}
5509@end group
5510@end smallexample
5511@noindent
5512The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5513a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5514a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5515of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5516
5517The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5518
362c1d1a
NS
5519@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5520@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5521@cindex section alignment
5522Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5523been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5524evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5525the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5526value in that section.
5527@smallexample
5528@group
5529SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5530 .output @{
5531 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5532 @dots{}
5533 @}
5534@dots{} @}
5535@end group
5536@end smallexample
5537
252b5132
RH
5538@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5539@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5540This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5541scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5542section.
5543
2d20f7bf
JJ
5544@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5545@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5546This is equivalent to either
5547@smallexample
5548(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5549@end smallexample
5550or
5551@smallexample
5552(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5553@end smallexample
5554@noindent
5555depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5556for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5557@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5558If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5559memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5560bytes in the on-disk file.
5561
5562This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5563any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5564@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5565be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5566working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5567
5568@noindent
5569Example:
5570@smallexample
5571 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5572@end smallexample
5573
5574@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5575@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5576This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5577evaluation purposes.
5578
5579@smallexample
5580 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5581@end smallexample
5582
a4f5ad88
JJ
5583@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5584@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5585This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5586@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5587When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5588does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5589@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5590boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5591it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5592@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5593
5594@smallexample
5595 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5596@end smallexample
5597
252b5132
RH
5598@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5599@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5600@cindex symbol defaults
5601Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5602defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5603return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5604default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5605shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5606the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5607existed, its value is preserved:
5608
5609@smallexample
5610@group
5611SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5612 .text : @{
5613 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5614 @dots{}
5615 @}
5616 @dots{}
5617@}
5618@end group
5619@end smallexample
5620
3ec57632
NC
5621@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5622@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5623Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5624
252b5132
RH
5625@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5626@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5627@cindex section load address in expression
5628Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5629the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5630attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5631Section LMA}).
5632
5633@kindex MAX
5634@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5635Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5636
5637@kindex MIN
5638@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5639Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5640
5641@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5642@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5643@cindex unallocated address, next
5644Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5645This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5646use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5647output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5648
3ec57632
NC
5649@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5650@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5651Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5652
ba916c8a
MM
5653@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5654@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5655Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5656value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5657option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5658@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5659be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5660``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5661name.
5662
252b5132
RH
5663@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5664@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5665@cindex section size
5666Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5667been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5668evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5669@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5670@smallexample
5671@group
5672SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5673 .output @{
5674 .start = . ;
5675 @dots{}
5676 .end = . ;
5677 @}
5678 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5679 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5680@dots{} @}
5681@end group
5682@end smallexample
5683
5684@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5685@itemx sizeof_headers
5686@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5687@cindex header size
5688Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5689information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5690this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5691choose, to facilitate paging.
5692
5693@cindex not enough room for program headers
5694@cindex program headers, not enough room
5695When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5696@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5697number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5698addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5699additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5700room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5701the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5702script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5703you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5704command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5705@end table
5706
5707@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5708@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5709@cindex implicit linker scripts
5710If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5711an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5712linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5713linker will report an error.
5714
5715An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5716
5717Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5718assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5719commands.
5720
5721Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5722at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5723read. This can affect archive searching.
5724
5725@ifset GENERIC
5726@node Machine Dependent
5727@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5728
5729@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5730@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5731sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5732functionality are not listed.
5733
5734@menu
36f63dca
NC
5735@ifset H8300
5736* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5737@end ifset
5738@ifset I960
5739* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5740@end ifset
5741@ifset ARM
5742* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5743@end ifset
5744@ifset HPPA
5745* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5746@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5747@ifset M68K
5748* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5749@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5750@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5751* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5752@end ifset
2469cfa2 5753@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5754* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5755@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5756@ifset M68HC11
5757* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5758@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5759@ifset POWERPC
5760* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5761@end ifset
5762@ifset POWERPC64
5763* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5764@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5765@ifset SPU
5766* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5767@end ifset
74459f0e 5768@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5769* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5770@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5771@ifset WIN32
5772* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5773@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5774@ifset XTENSA
5775* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5776@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5777@end menu
5778@end ifset
5779
252b5132
RH
5780@ifset H8300
5781@ifclear GENERIC
5782@raisesections
5783@end ifclear
5784
5785@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5786@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5787
5788@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5789For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5790you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5791
5792@table @emph
5793@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5794@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5795@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5796targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5797program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5798respectively.
5799
5800@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5801@item synthesizing instructions
5802@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5803@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5804sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5805page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5806(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5807@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5808top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5809
5810@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5811@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5812biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5813which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5814page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5815(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5816@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5817the top page of memory).
5818
5819@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5820@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
582132 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5822changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5823(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5824@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5825the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5826@end table
5827
5828@ifclear GENERIC
5829@lowersections
5830@end ifclear
5831@end ifset
5832
36f63dca 5833@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5834@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5835@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5836@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5837@node Renesas
5838@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5839
c2dcd04e
NC
5840@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5841H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5842options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5843@end ifset
5844@end ifclear
5845
5846@ifset I960
5847@ifclear GENERIC
5848@raisesections
5849@end ifclear
5850
5851@node i960
5852@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5853
5854@cindex i960 support
5855
5856You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5857specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5858family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5859incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5860linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5861libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5862search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5863
5864For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5865well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5866paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5867the names
5868
5869@smallexample
5870@group
5871try
5872libtry.a
5873tryca
5874libtryca.a
5875@end group
5876@end smallexample
5877
5878@noindent
5879The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5880two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5881
5882You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5883the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5884use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5885specifies a library.
5886
5887@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5888@cindex relaxing on i960
5889@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5890you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5891@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5892them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5893instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5894instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5895target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5896not itself call any subroutines).
5897
48229727
JB
5898@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
5899@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
5900@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
5901The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
5902
5903The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
5904
36f63dca
NC
5905@ifclear GENERIC
5906@lowersections
5907@end ifclear
5908@end ifset
5909
5910@ifset ARM
5911@ifclear GENERIC
5912@raisesections
5913@end ifclear
5914
93fd0973
SC
5915@ifset M68HC11
5916@ifclear GENERIC
5917@raisesections
5918@end ifclear
5919
5920@node M68HC11/68HC12
5921@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5922
5923@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5924
5925@subsection Linker Relaxation
5926
5927For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5928optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5929
5930@table @emph
5931@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5932@item relaxing address modes
5933@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5934targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5935program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5936respectively.
5937
5938@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5939transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5940page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5941
5942@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5943When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5944of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5945addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5946@code{bset} instructions.
5947
5948@end table
5949
5950@subsection Trampoline Generation
5951
5952@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5953@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5954For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5955call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5956will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5957trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5958case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5959point to the function trampoline.
5960
5961@ifclear GENERIC
5962@lowersections
5963@end ifclear
5964@end ifset
5965
36f63dca 5966@node ARM
3674e28a 5967@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5968
5969@cindex ARM interworking support
5970@kindex --support-old-code
5971For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5972between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5973been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5974line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5975libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5976option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5977given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5978which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5979the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5980non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5981
5982@cindex thumb entry point
5983@cindex entry point, thumb
5984@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5985The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5986@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5987But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5988branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5989executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5990
ce11ba6c
KT
5991@cindex PE import table prefixing
5992@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5993The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5994the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5995elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5996import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5997
e489d0ae
PB
5998@cindex BE8
5999@kindex --be8
6000The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6001executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6002The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6003
3674e28a
PB
6004@cindex TARGET1
6005@kindex --target1-rel
6006@kindex --target1-abs
6007The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6008@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6009or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6010and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6011
6012@cindex TARGET2
6013@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6014The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6015@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6016meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6017@table @samp
6018@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6019@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6020@item abs
6021@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6022@item got-rel
6023@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6024@end table
6025
319850b4
JB
6026@cindex FIX_V4BX
6027@kindex --fix-v4bx
6028The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6029specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6030interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6031also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6032
6033In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6034linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6035@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6036
6037In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6038relocations are ignored.
6039
845b51d6
PB
6040@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6041@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6042Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6043relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6044
6045@smallexample
6046TST rM, #1
6047MOVEQ PC, rM
6048BX Rn
6049@end smallexample
6050
6051This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6052and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6053condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6054
33bfe774
JB
6055@cindex USE_BLX
6056@kindex --use-blx
6057The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6058BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6059situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6060code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6061each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6062
6063This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6064specify it if you are using that target.
6065
c6dd86c6
JB
6066@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6067@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6068The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6069bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6070instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6071to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6072the support code can read the intended values.
6073
6074The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6075intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6076and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6077intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6078full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6079you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6080
6081If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6082enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6083@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6084mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6085vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6086@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6087
6088If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6089potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6090such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6091first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6092instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6093the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6094are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6095
bf21ed78
MS
6096@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6097@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6098The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6099warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6100enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6101linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6102using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6103not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6104
6105@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6106@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6107The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6108warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6109@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6110linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6111using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6112
726150b7
NC
6113@cindex PIC_VENEER
6114@kindex --pic-veneer
6115The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6116ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6117is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6118@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6119
6120@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6121@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6122The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6123code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6124perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6125placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6126controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6127The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6128duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6129group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6130code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6131where they should be placed.
6132
6133The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6134@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6135placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6136branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6137placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6138value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6139exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6140A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6141linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6142from the input sections.
6143
6144The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6145@samp{N = +1}.
6146
1a51c1a4
NC
6147Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6148only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6149otherwise.
6150
36f63dca
NC
6151@ifclear GENERIC
6152@lowersections
6153@end ifclear
6154@end ifset
6155
6156@ifset HPPA
6157@ifclear GENERIC
6158@raisesections
6159@end ifclear
6160
6161@node HPPA ELF32
6162@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6163@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6164@kindex --multi-subspace
6165When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6166import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6167The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6168stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6169multiple sub-spaces.
6170
6171@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6172@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6173Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6174stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6175@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6176sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6177a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6178the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6179conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6180prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6181A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6182branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6183@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6184@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6185detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6186positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6187
6188Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6189single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6190create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6191large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6192
6193@ifclear GENERIC
6194@lowersections
6195@end ifclear
6196@end ifset
6197
7fb9f789
NC
6198@ifset M68K
6199@ifclear GENERIC
6200@raisesections
6201@end ifclear
6202
6203@node M68K
6204@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6205
6206@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6207@kindex --got=@var{type}
6208The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6209The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6210@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6211the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6212@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6213entries only at non-negative offsets.
6214@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6215entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6216support such GOTs.
6217@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6218output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6219file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6220files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6221
6222@ifclear GENERIC
6223@lowersections
6224@end ifclear
6225@end ifset
6226
36f63dca
NC
6227@ifset MMIX
6228@ifclear GENERIC
6229@raisesections
6230@end ifclear
6231
6232@node MMIX
6233@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6234For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6235@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6236understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6237can translate between the two formats.
6238
6239There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6240Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6241registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6242equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6243@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6244global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6245this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6246symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6247
7a2de473
HPN
6248Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6249@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6250The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6251of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6252
6253Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6254are left out from an mmo file.
6255
6256@ifclear GENERIC
6257@lowersections
6258@end ifclear
6259@end ifset
6260
6261@ifset MSP430
6262@ifclear GENERIC
6263@raisesections
6264@end ifclear
6265
6266@node MSP430
6267@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6268For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6269will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6270just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6271
6272@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6273The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6274
6275@table @code
6276@item @samp{.vectors}
6277Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6278
6279@item @samp{.bootloader}
6280Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6281in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6282
6283@item @samp{.infomem}
6284Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6285this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6286
c0065db7 6287@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6288This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6289in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6290
6291@item @samp{.noinit}
6292Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6293
c0065db7 6294The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6295@end table
6296
6297@ifclear GENERIC
6298@lowersections
6299@end ifclear
6300@end ifset
6301
2a60a7a8
AM
6302@ifset POWERPC
6303@ifclear GENERIC
6304@raisesections
6305@end ifclear
6306
6307@node PowerPC ELF32
6308@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6309@cindex PowerPC long branches
6310@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6311Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6312displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6313@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6314@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6315the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6316section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6317section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6318@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6319both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6320considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6321
6322@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6323@table @option
6324@cindex PowerPC PLT
6325@kindex --bss-plt
6326@item --bss-plt
6327Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6328generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6329the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6330writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6331@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6332PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6333compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6334BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6335
016687f8
AM
6336@kindex --secure-plt
6337@item --secure-plt
6338@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6339@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6340when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6341layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6342style BSS PLT.
6343
2a60a7a8
AM
6344@cindex PowerPC GOT
6345@kindex --sdata-got
6346@item --sdata-got
6347The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6348sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6349@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6350section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6351@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6352@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6353@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6354@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6355PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6356pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6357GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6358really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6359
6360@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6361@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6362@item --emit-stub-syms
6363This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6364symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6365
6366@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6367@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6368@item --no-tls-optimize
6369PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6370sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6371disable the optimization.
6372@end table
6373
6374@ifclear GENERIC
6375@lowersections
6376@end ifclear
6377@end ifset
6378
6379@ifset POWERPC64
6380@ifclear GENERIC
6381@raisesections
6382@end ifclear
6383
6384@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6385@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6386
6387@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6388@table @option
6389@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6390@kindex --stub-group-size
6391@item --stub-group-size
6392Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6393by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6394@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6395sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6396a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6397the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6398conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6399prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6400A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6401branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6402@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6403@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6404detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6405positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6406
6407Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6408single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6409create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6410large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6411
6412@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6413@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6414@item --emit-stub-syms
6415This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6416symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6417
6418@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6419@kindex --dotsyms
6420@kindex --no-dotsyms
6421@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6422These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6423in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6424function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6425code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6426properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6427to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6428@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6429dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6430feature.
6431
6432@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6433@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6434@item --no-tls-optimize
6435PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6436sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6437disable the optimization.
6438
6439@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6440@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6441@item --no-opd-optimize
6442PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6443corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6444the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6445Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6446
6447@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6448@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6449@item --non-overlapping-opd
6450Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6451@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6452the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6453entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6454
6455@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6456@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6457@item --no-toc-optimize
6458PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6459entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6460reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6461marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6462marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6463relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6464unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6465reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6466discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6467reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6468code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6469optimization.
6470
6471@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6472@kindex --no-multi-toc
6473@item --no-multi-toc
6474By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6475entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6476total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6477grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6478TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6479calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6480help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
648164K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6482Use this option to turn off this feature.
6483@end table
6484
6485@ifclear GENERIC
6486@lowersections
6487@end ifclear
6488@end ifset
6489
49fa1e15
AM
6490@ifset SPU
6491@ifclear GENERIC
6492@raisesections
6493@end ifclear
6494
6495@node SPU ELF
6496@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6497
6498@cindex SPU ELF options
6499@table @option
6500
6501@cindex SPU plugins
6502@kindex --plugin
6503@item --plugin
6504This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6505
6506@cindex SPU overlays
6507@kindex --no-overlays
6508@item --no-overlays
6509Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6510regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6511@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6512turns off all this special overlay handling.
6513
6514@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6515@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6516@item --emit-stub-syms
6517This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6518symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6519
6520@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6521@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6522@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6523This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6524function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6525on calls to non-overlay regions.
6526
6527@cindex SPU local store size
6528@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6529@item --local-store=lo:hi
6530@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6531the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6532range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6533
c0065db7 6534@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6535@kindex --stack-analysis
6536@item --stack-analysis
6537SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6538unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6539under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6540@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6541@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6542determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6543for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6544for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6545for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6546find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6547and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6548under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6549dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6550is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6551and calls will be given.
6552
c0065db7 6553@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6554@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6555@item --emit-stack-syms
6556This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6557in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6558These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6559functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6560functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6561such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6562The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6563@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6564@end table
6565
6566@ifclear GENERIC
6567@lowersections
6568@end ifclear
6569@end ifset
6570
36f63dca
NC
6571@ifset TICOFF
6572@ifclear GENERIC
6573@raisesections
6574@end ifclear
6575
6576@node TI COFF
6577@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6578@cindex TI COFF versions
6579@kindex --format=@var{version}
6580The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6581TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6582also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6583format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6584header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6585
6586@ifclear GENERIC
6587@lowersections
6588@end ifclear
6589@end ifset
6590
2ca22b03
NC
6591@ifset WIN32
6592@ifclear GENERIC
6593@raisesections
6594@end ifclear
6595
6596@node WIN32
6597@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6598
c0065db7 6599This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6600See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6601command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6602
6603@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6604@cindex import libraries
6605@item import libraries
69da35b5 6606The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6607libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6608regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6609archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6610support for creating such libraries provided with the
6611@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6612
c0065db7
RM
6613@item exporting DLL symbols
6614@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6615The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6616
6617@table @emph
6618@item using auto-export functionality
6619@cindex using auto-export functionality
6620By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6621which is controlled by the following command line options:
6622
0a5d968e
NC
6623@itemize
6624@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6625@item --exclude-symbols
6626@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6627@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6628@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6629@end itemize
6630
09e2aba4
DK
6631When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6632(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6633symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6634often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6635private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6636options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6637exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6638final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6639
6640If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6641command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6642if either of the following are true:
6643
6644@itemize
6645@item A DEF file is used.
6646@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6647@end itemize
dc8465bf 6648
c0065db7
RM
6649@item using a DEF file
6650@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6651Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6652an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6653exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6654name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6655command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6656
6657@example
6658gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6659@end example
6660
0a5d968e
NC
6661Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6662@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6663
dc8465bf
NC
6664Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6665
6666@example
4b5bd4e7 6667LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6668
6669EXPORTS
6670foo
6671bar
6672_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6673another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6674var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6675doo = foo == foo2
6676eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6677@end example
dc8465bf 6678
7fcab871 6679This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6680symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6681alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6682by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6683@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6684@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6685export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6686in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6687symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6688
6b31ad16
DS
6689The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6690name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6691the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6692
b45619c0
NC
6693When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6694library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6695@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6696executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6697
6698With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6699specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6700non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6701
6702If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6703or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6704filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6705
4b5bd4e7
DS
6706The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6707
6708@example
6709EXPORTS
6710 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6711 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6712 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6713@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6714
6715Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6716@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6717@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6718@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6719Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6720@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6721string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6722
6723The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6724
6725@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6726will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6727by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6728linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6729library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6730
6731@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6732The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6733the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6734@code{*_imp__foo}).
6735
6736@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6737well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6738read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6739variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6740the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6741extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6742application will behave unexpectedly.
6743
6744@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6745it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6746symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6747API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6748the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6749
4b5bd4e7
DS
6750See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6751other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6752
6753@cindex creating a DEF file
6754While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6755with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6756
6757@item Using decorations
6758@cindex Using decorations
6759Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6760itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6761declared as:
6762
6763@example
6764__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6765__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6766@end example
6767
6768All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6769any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6770this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6771the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6772
6773Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6774decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6775instead:
6776
6777@example
6778__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6779__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6780@end example
6781
c0065db7
RM
6782This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6783when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6784variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6785code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6786of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6787omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6788@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6789information.
c0065db7 6790@end table
dc8465bf 6791
2ca22b03
NC
6792@cindex automatic data imports
6793@item automatic data imports
6794The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6795by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6796compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6797issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6798code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6799c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6800initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6801decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6802platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6803command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6804The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6805suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6806trigger the feature's use.
6807
c0065db7 6808auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6809additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6810
c0065db7 6811"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6812documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6813
c0065db7
RM
6814The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6815occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6816One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6817below.
6818
6819@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6820For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6821object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6822offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6823field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6824in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6825without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6826The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6827references.
6828
c0065db7
RM
6829The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6830be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6831themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6832runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6833compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6834support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6835run without error on an older system.
6836
c0065db7
RM
6837@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6838enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6839
6840@cindex direct linking to a dll
6841@item direct linking to a dll
6842The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6843including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6844libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6845traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6846libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6847function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6848though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6849storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6850tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6851large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6852
c0065db7 6853Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6854@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6855of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6856perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6857select the dll instead of an import library.
6858
2ca22b03 6859
69da35b5
NC
6860For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6861to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6862
6863@example
45e948fe
NC
6864libxxx.dll.a
6865xxx.dll.a
6866libxxx.a
6867xxx.lib
69da35b5 6868cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6869libxxx.dll
6870xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6871@end example
6872
69da35b5
NC
6873before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6874
c0065db7
RM
6875(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6876where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6877@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6878file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6879@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6880
c0065db7
RM
6881Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6882@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6883was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6884various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6885could coexist on the same machine.
6886
2ca22b03
NC
6887The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6888applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6889libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6890
6891@example
6892bin/
6893 cygxxx.dll
6894lib/
6895 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6896 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6897@end example
6898
c0065db7
RM
6899Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6900done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6901
69021. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6903@example
6904gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6905@end example
2ca22b03 6906
69da35b5
NC
6907However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6908(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6909@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6910not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6911
2ca22b03
NC
69122. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6913directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6914should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6915making the app/dll.
6916
6917@example
6918ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6919@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6920
6921Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6922
6923@example
6924gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6925@end example
69da35b5
NC
6926
6927This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6928perfectly legal
6929
6930@example
6931bin/
6932 cygxxx-5.dll
6933lib/
c0065db7 6934 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6935@end example
6936
dc8465bf 6937Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6938even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6939@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6940
6941Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6942wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6943
69441. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6945work with auto-imported data.
6946
dc8465bf
NC
69472. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6948import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6949symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6950for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6951possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6952
45e948fe
NC
69533. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6954critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6955in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6956stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6957
69da35b5 6958So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6959true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6960a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6961binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6962massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6963requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6964will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6965
c0065db7 6966@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6967@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6968@item adding additional names
6969Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6970A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6971exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6972when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6973import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6974
c0065db7 6975@example
dc8465bf
NC
6976LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6977
6978EXPORTS
c0065db7 6979foo
dc8465bf 6980_foo = foo
c0065db7 6981@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6982
6983The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6984
6985Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6986source code using the "weak" attribute:
6987
c0065db7
RM
6988@example
6989void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6990void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6991@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6992
6993See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6994symbols.
6995
6996@item renaming symbols
6997Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6998kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6999@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7000DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7001created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7002
c0065db7 7003@example
dc8465bf
NC
7004LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7005
7006EXPORTS
7007_foo = foo
c0065db7 7008@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7009
7010The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7011@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7012@end table
dc8465bf 7013
0a5d968e 7014Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7015unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7016If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7017@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7018that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7019@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7020renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7021to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7022the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7023In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7024which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7025
7026@cindex weak externals
7027@item weak externals
7028The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7029weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7030defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7031are three variants of weak externals:
7032@itemize
7033@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7034called lazy externals.
7035@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7036This form is not presently implemented.
7037@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7038implemented.
7039@end itemize
7040As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7041are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7042uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7043
7044@cindex aligned common symbols
7045@item aligned common symbols
7046As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7047desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7048the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7049carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7050by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7051tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7052but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7053warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7054@end table
7055
7056@ifclear GENERIC
7057@lowersections
7058@end ifclear
7059@end ifset
7060
e0001a05
NC
7061@ifset XTENSA
7062@ifclear GENERIC
7063@raisesections
7064@end ifclear
7065
7066@node Xtensa
7067@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7068
7069@cindex Xtensa processors
7070The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7071@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7072specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7073keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7074example, with the command:
7075
7076@smallexample
7077SECTIONS
7078@{
7079 .text : @{
7080 *(.literal .text)
7081 @}
7082@}
7083@end smallexample
7084
7085@noindent
7086@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7087and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7088literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7089interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7090group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7091files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7092and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7093
43cd72b9 7094@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7095@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7096Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7097provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7098is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7099literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7100will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7101location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7102the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7103unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7104@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7105range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7106
7107For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7108to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7109instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7110instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7111instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7112@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7113hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7114By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7115switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7116density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7117instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7118performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7119linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7120a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7121
7122The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7123control the linker:
7124
7125@cindex Xtensa options
7126@table @option
e0001a05 7127@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
7128@item --no-relax
7129Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
7130by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
7131relaxation.
7132
7133@item --size-opt
7134When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7135more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7136no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7137alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7138preserve the correctness of the code.
7139@end table
e0001a05
NC
7140
7141@ifclear GENERIC
7142@lowersections
7143@end ifclear
7144@end ifset
7145
252b5132
RH
7146@ifclear SingleFormat
7147@node BFD
7148@chapter BFD
7149
7150@cindex back end
7151@cindex object file management
7152@cindex object formats available
7153@kindex objdump -i
7154The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7155These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7156object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7157format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7158it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7159associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7160object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7161(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7162list all the formats available for your configuration.
7163
7164@cindex BFD requirements
7165@cindex requirements for BFD
7166As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7167several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7168BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7169formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7170been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7171BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7172may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7173
7174One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7175mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7176useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7177conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7178
7179@menu
7180* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7181@end menu
7182
7183@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7184@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7185@cindex opening object files
7186@include bfdsumm.texi
7187@end ifclear
7188
7189@node Reporting Bugs
7190@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7191@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7192@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7193
ff5dcc92 7194Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7195
7196Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7197it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7198to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7199work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7200@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7201
7202In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7203information that enables us to fix the bug.
7204
7205@menu
7206* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7207* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7208@end menu
7209
7210@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7211@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7212@cindex bug criteria
7213
7214If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7215
7216@itemize @bullet
7217@cindex fatal signal
7218@cindex linker crash
7219@cindex crash of linker
7220@item
7221If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7222@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7223
7224@cindex error on valid input
7225@item
ff5dcc92 7226If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7227
7228@cindex invalid input
7229@item
ff5dcc92 7230If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7231may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7232object files are correct.
7233
7234@item
7235If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7236improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7237@end itemize
7238
7239@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7240@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7241@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7242@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7243
7244A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7245products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7246recommend you contact that organization first.
7247
7248You can find contact information for many support companies and
7249individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7250distribution.
7251
ad22bfe8 7252@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7253Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7254@value{BUGURL}.
7255@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7256
7257The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7258@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7259fact or leave it out, state it!
7260
7261Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7262problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7263assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7264matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7265the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7266location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7267were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7268into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7269specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7270and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7271
7272Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7273the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7274on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7275
7276Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7277bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7278respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7279You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7280
7281To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7282
7283@itemize @bullet
7284@item
ff5dcc92 7285The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7286the @samp{--version} argument.
7287
7288Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7289the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7290
7291@item
ff5dcc92 7292Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7293patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7294
7295@item
7296The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7297version number.
7298
7299@item
ff5dcc92 7300What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7301``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7302
7303@item
7304The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7305observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7306list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7307sufficient.
7308
7309If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7310and then we might not encounter the bug.
7311
7312@item
7313A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7314bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7315provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7316bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7317state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7318requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7319we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7320attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7321
7322If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7323@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7324object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7325@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7326how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7327
7328@item
7329A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7330incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7331
ff5dcc92 7332Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7333will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7334not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7335a chance to make a mistake.
7336
7337Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7338say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7339copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7340C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7341and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7342fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7343you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7344any conclusion from our observations.
7345
7346@item
ff5dcc92 7347If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7348diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7349@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7350If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7351context, not by line number.
7352
7353The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7354sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7355@end itemize
7356
7357Here are some things that are not necessary:
7358
7359@itemize @bullet
7360@item
7361A description of the envelope of the bug.
7362
7363Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7364which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7365changes will not affect it.
7366
7367This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7368will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7369with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7370We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7371
7372Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7373of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7374output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7375less time, and so on.
7376
7377However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7378report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7379
7380@item
7381A patch for the bug.
7382
7383A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7384the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7385a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7386to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7387
ff5dcc92 7388Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7389construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7390through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7391able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7392fixed.
7393
7394And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7395patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7396help us to understand.
7397
7398@item
7399A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7400
7401Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7402things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7403@end itemize
7404
7405@node MRI
7406@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7407@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7408To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7409linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7410alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7411described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7412simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7413@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7414linker commands; these commands are described here.
7415
7416In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7417file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7418features to make use of them.
7419
7420You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7421@samp{-c} command-line option.
7422
7423Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7424command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7425blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7426MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7427issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7428
7429Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7430
7431You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7432lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7433The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7434
7435@table @code
7436@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7437@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7438@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7439Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7440the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7441@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7442your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7443script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7444commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7445input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7446@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7447
7448@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7449@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7450Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7451in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7452
7453@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7454
7455@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7456@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7457Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7458@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7459
7460@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7461@item BASE @var{expression}
7462Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7463absolute addresses) in the output file.
7464
7465@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7466@item CHIP @var{expression}
7467@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7468This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7469
7470@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7471@item END
7472This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7473
7474@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7475@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7476Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7477language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7478
7479@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7480@item
252b5132
RH
7481S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7482
7483@item
7484IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7485
7486@item
7487COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7488@samp{COFF}
7489@end enumerate
7490
7491@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7492@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7493Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7494@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7495
7496The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7497same line, with no change in its effect.
7498
7499@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7500@item LOAD @var{filename}
7501@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7502Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7503same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7504command line.
7505
7506@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7507@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7508@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7509MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7510option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7511
7512@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7513@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7514@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7515Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7516order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7517script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7518sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7519file, in the order specified.
7520
7521@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7522@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7523@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7524@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7525Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7526@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7527
7528@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7529@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7530@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7531@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7532You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7533specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7534If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7535@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7536@end table
7537
793c5807
NC
7538@node GNU Free Documentation License
7539@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7540@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7541
370b66a1
CD
7542@node LD Index
7543@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7544
7545@printindex cp
7546
7547@tex
7548% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7549% meantime:
7550\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7551\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7552\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7553\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7554\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7555\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7556\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7557\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7558\page\colophon
7559% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7560@end tex
7561
252b5132 7562@bye
This page took 0.945634 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.